Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . Finally.

2 .

Germany. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical panels. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. such as duct. and piping. such as mechanical equipment.

Create detail views. you learn where the training files are located. to provide a richer and more finished design. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and sheets to document the project. NOTE Depending on your installation. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. In this exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. However. After completing each exercise. templates. On the Contents tab. When you open a training file. when you add ductwork. Metric file names have an _m suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. however. For example. your Training folder may be in a different location. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you can choose to save your work. Contact your CAD manager for more information. such as templates and families. views. annotations. and tags. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. So. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Create schedules. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. When you install the training files as instructed.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. You do not design entire systems. as well as how to open and save them. For example. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning.

you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For example. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you are prompted to save the changes. enter the new file name. and click Open. if you open settings. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. scroll down. 8 If you have made changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. You may close the file with or without saving changes. the Open dialog displays. double-click Imperial or Metric. a list of file types displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 3 In the right pane.rvt and make changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and click the Training Files icon. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For File name.rvt) is selected. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Save.rvt. and you can open any supported file type. click ➤ Save As. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the training file name. verify that Project Files (*. For Files of type. select the folder in which to save the new file.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawings. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. scope. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the parameter is one of association or connection. quantities. every drawing sheet. sections. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. 2D and 3D view. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedules required for a building project. drawing sheets. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the hierarchy of elements. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the operation of the software is parametric. In this case. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the floor or roof remains connected. and phases when you need it. schedules. In the Revit MEP model. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the door retains this relationship to the partition. hence. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. You learn the terminology. ■ ■ 7 . and plans. If the length of the elevation is changed. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.

For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. They display in relevant views of the design. tags. For example. For example. For example. sprinklers. and reference planes are datum elements. and electrical panels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and keynotes are annotation elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. boilers. and electrical panels. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. sprinklers. filled regions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. dimensions. dimensions. When you change something. They help to describe or document the design. Examples include detail lines. For example. levels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. tags. walls and ceilings are hosts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and 2D detail components. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. grids. sinks. ducts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example.

by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. elevation views. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. This information includes components used to design the model. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. Most often. for example. first floor. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and ceilings. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you must be in a section or elevation view. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The project file contains all information for the building design. For example.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. floors. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. programming is not required. section views. views of the project. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. If you can draw. Project: In Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and types. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. In other cases. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. schedules. In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. North . families. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. By using a single project file.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. such as roofs. To place levels. top of wall. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.

You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. hiding. each in-place family contains only a single type. A type can also be a style. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and similar graphical representation. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A type can be a specific size of a family. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. showing. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. With a few clicks. System families include ducts. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. pipes. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. and wires. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. identical use. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can also display several project views at one time. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Then experiment with them. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. However. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button.

then select what you want to modify. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and settings. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and for switching views. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for editing existing elements.. select the tool first. architect-specific tools.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. data and systems. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design. project and system parameters. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. closes the application menu (double-click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. To keep a panel expanded. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays frequently used tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides requested information. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides access to common tools. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing. click. such as Export and Publish.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Open) save the current drawing..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Save As) export the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Export) On the application menu.

click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click.. and Walkthrough. or template file.. family. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family.On the application menu. but is not enabled by default. To enable or disable a tool item. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing. provides views including Default 3D. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . or template file. Camera. annotation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. to.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information. saves a current project. annotation. (Licensing) close the file..

Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . check the Status Bar. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. However. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Clipboard. To hide the Status Bar. repeat the command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Clear the Status Bar check mark. This displays the command history in a list. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. workshared components. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. When you are highlighting an element or component. when you switch to another editing mode. displaying the same information. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Starting with the most recent command. or the Family Editor.To undo or redo a series of operations. To show the Status Bar again. When you are using a command. In addition. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Group. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Modify.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Place a Wall. for example.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar.

18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. After you are familiar with these tasks.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. Zoom the view In the tutorials. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. For example. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.

5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click . When you release the mouse button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms in on the selected area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 9 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. on the Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. ➤ Options. For more information about SteeringWheels. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. bottoms. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display along the ends. These are the drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR.Design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. After you are familiar with these tasks.HVAC Plan . and open Level 2 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Small blue dots. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. as shown.

click the Undo command. In this example. 6 On the Undo menu. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.3 Click and drag the bottom control. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. or press CTRL+Z. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the first item in the list. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

After selecting the element to move. Some commands. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. you want to move the duct. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. as shown. In this case. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and drag it to the left as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the starting position.

stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 To end a command. Press ESC twice.Return. such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Select Mechanical .Supply. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Click OK. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. For example.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

You can either select a template from the template library. create and manage views. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In that case. under Template file. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.rte template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. New projects inherit all the families. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as ducts and pipes. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. use copy/monitor. and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. click Browse. select Project. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. link files. click Training files. system families. such as coordination review and interference checking. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. you learn how to start a project from a template. 27 . 5 In the New Project dialog. the default building levels and standard views. Finally. 6 Click OK. and click Open. and loadable families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as the default project units and settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. settings. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can choose from several templates. under Create new.

(Browse). Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For example. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For Location. you can select it now. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click (Browse). click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. When you select the material. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. for City. Click OK twice. for Energy Data. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Click OK.7 In the Project Browser. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. review the construction materials listed. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click Browse. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Level 1. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. select School or University. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 8 In the drawing area. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click Cancel. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.rte template and click Open. create another new project using the Construction template. 10 Using the same method. NH. If you want to use a template other than the default. under Energy Analysis. In the Choose Template dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click Edit. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and open North. select Manchester. ■ For Building Construction. navigate to Imperial Templates. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Project template. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project.

they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 27 Click OK. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. under Duct Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 26 In the right pane. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Categories. 24 In the right pane. 4 1/2". click Rectangular. select Views. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 12 1/2". 5 1/2". 23 In the left pane. click Sizes.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Holding CTRL. and fire protection systems. 4 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and demand factors for electrical systems. 10 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. for 3/4". power distribution systems. under Duct Settings. Click OK twice. click Wiring. click Round. wiring. under Pipe Settings. for 3 1/2". 22 In the right pane. 33 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. plumbing. and 5 1/2". piping. select Identity Data. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 11 1/2".

synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 4 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. families. select Project. select Associated Level. select Family and Type.Origin to Origin. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Linking Projects In this exercise. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Click Open. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training. To enable this coordination. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. From the Positioning list. For Sort by. select Auto . Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and groups that are contained in a project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. sheets. select Sub-Discipline. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Template file. 5 Click OK. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. under Create new. click Browse.rvt. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. In addition. For Then by. select View Name. 38 Close the file. For Then by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

Load. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and Import dialogs. click My Library. or families. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the My Library icon. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. ➤ Open.11 In the Places dialog. Save. click (Add Value). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 15 Under Library Name. and change the name to My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice.

14 Click in the drawing area. 19 Click Cancel. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. If you want to relocate this path. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click OK. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. such as bump maps. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Select My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 21 On the File Locations tab. 20 Click ➤ Options. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path is determined during installation. (Remove Value) to delete the library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. select Ignore words in uppercase. click Places. click Edit. 5 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click the Spelling tab. and decal image files. 23 Click 24 Click OK. view the current path. 27 Click OK. 9 In the text editor. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.

As you zoom in and out within a view. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Restore Defaults. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. you modify snap increments. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click the Spelling tab. 19 In the Options dialog. click Edit. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. work with snapping turned off. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. and enter 1 . click Browse.. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Close.17 In the Spelling dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click File menu ➤ Save. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 25 Close the file without saving it. you modify snap settings. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the text editor. click Training Files. under Template file. under Dimension Snaps. 6 In the Snaps dialog.rte. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 20 Under Settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 2 In the New Project dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 4 In the New Project dialog.

If it does not. 8 In the Snaps dialog. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter SM. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. deselect Chain. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . For example. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. While sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. and move the cursor to the right. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.

14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges. 25 Click OK. Do not set the wall end point. 22 Move the cursor downward. 19 Enter SM. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and move the cursor to the right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the midpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and delete the value 1’ . 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. with or without saving it.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

In this exercise.autodesk. After applying a color scheme to the zones. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). By following the recommended workflow. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you design a mechanical system for an office building. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you first plan the system. This system consists of a cooling tower. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will understand the process. and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. As you create the mechanical system. go to http://www. In this lesson.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. However. you first configure the linked architectural model. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. 45 . duct system and a hydronic piping system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. At the end of the tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.

and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . not in the MEP training file. ceilings. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. select Room Bounding. click Training Files. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you add a level for plenums. indicating that it’s the active view. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. These components are defined in the architectural training file.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. roof. and after the linked model highlights. Next. In this section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. click to select it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE When working with a linked file. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.

and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Esc. enter 8'. 9 On the Draw panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. The new level is placed.MEP. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Click Plan View Types. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and double-click West . Preparing Spaces | 47 .

In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Level. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and click Properties. for Default View Template. enter an Offset of 1' 0". The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Under Extents. For Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. and click Apply Default View Template. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Plenum. and for Offset. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Edit. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select MEP . select Design. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. For Cut plane. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter 0.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. However. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Level Above (Level 3). For View Classification. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you can choose to save your work. for View Scale. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum Plan. for Top. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. In this exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for View Range. Under View Depth.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.Space Plan is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. enter 0. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Placing Spaces | 49 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings). select Level 2 Plenum. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. walls. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. For Upper Limit. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. For (Tag Location). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter 219. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. 9 Select the space. enter Library. Click OK. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. For Name. 14 In the drawing area. ensuring coordination between the files. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0. and then click Modify. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Offset. select Level 3. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. for Upper Limit. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.rvt. enter 0. and for Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Space Plan is highlighted.

If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. enter Corridor. 10 Using the same method. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes.7 In the Project Browser. which was numbered 219Q. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and press Enter. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule. double-click the space name. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 9 In the floor plan. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 11 Close the schedule view. as shown. change the space number to 216A.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. you place a space in a chase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

click in the chase area to place the space. 10 In the plan view. For Limit Offset. expand Spaces. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. for Name. enter 225PC. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. and then click OK. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Roof Level. For Offset. select the space. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. In the plan view. For Number. select Interior and Reference. 12 Click in the section view. right-click. 6 Enter VG. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . ■ ■ 14 Click OK. On the Options Bar. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Level 3.4 Press Esc. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. enter 0. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Identity Data. enter 4'. and click Element Properties. enter Chase.

under Loaded Tags. ceilings. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. floors. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. select Space Tag With Volume. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 17 Type ZF.Space Plan. 15 Press Esc. and maximize the view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Bounding elements (such as walls. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. In the next exercises. and click OK.

The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In this exercise. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 .Zoning is highlighted. After a space is placed in an area. which removes the space from the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. click Training Files. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). To display space reference lines. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone.

under Energy Analysis. you can add or remove a space from the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. and modify the zone properties. select Occupiable. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 4 In the drawing area. Next. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click 121 Cafeteria.5 In the System Browser. under Spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. the Edit Zone tab displays. The graphic in the System Browser updates. The Zone tool is active. To display space reference lines. As you do this. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click Finish Editing Zone. Using the Edit Zone tab. Instruction 221. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Computer Lab 222. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Training Files. and click OK.

Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . To view the zone in the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Expand HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. type VG. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Instruction. you need to activate the zone visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser.

62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .West . You activated zone visibility in the views. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Spaces.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. for Name. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 11 Close the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. expand 2 . under Identity Data. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 9 In the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.Area B. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . To display space reference lines. click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. enter 2 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Reference.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. zoom out. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view.Zoning view to activate it. Select Attached End. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view.5 Click in the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.

for Name Value. click Training Files. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and zone information. space. click the corner where the Top. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Front. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.Zoning view. In this exercise. double-click the zone tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. on the ViewCube. enter Lounge . you verify the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.Zoning to make it the active view. double-click Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt.East.

You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . With 109 Lounge selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Click (Highlight). verify that Wireframe is selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. and select 109 Lounge. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

Next. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). select 109 Lounge. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and then click OK. and click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Building> is selected. For Construction Type. For People.■ On the Details tab. and then click OK. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. scroll down in the left pane. Below the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and in the People dialog. select 1_South_Lounge. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.

NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For Cooling Information. and humidification set point. verify that 74. and air changes per hour. and dehumidification set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. click (Shading). This indicates the outdoor air per person. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For Heating Information. heating air temperature. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. floors. cooling air temperature. and other room-bounding components. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : 54. roofs.00 °F : 90. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. verify that 70. 12 Using the methods learned previously. outdoor air per area. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.00 °F : N/A is specified. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. Below the list of spaces and zones. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the cooling set point.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plenum. select Plenum. click Cancel. Under Energy Analysis. select Level 3. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. For Offset. enter 0. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Under Energy Analysis. open MEP . Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. for Number. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

click Training Files. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In this exercise. For Location. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. For Postal Code. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for City. space. On the Place tab. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and zone information. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. verify that Manchester. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. select School or University. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you verified building. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . for Energy Data.rvt. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. under Energy Analysis. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Edit. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NH. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . click in the Value field. double-click Level 2 . enter 03101.Space Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.

after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. a cooling load. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For People. enter 150 Btu/h. and click OK. click in the Value column. For Building Construction. For Sliver Space Tolerance. If. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Level 1 is selected. In order to select a space. verify that New Construction is selected. for Values. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Sensible. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 8 In the drawing area. For Latent. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Select Area per person. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. or neither.Audio Visual. select Library . select Specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. enter 200 Btu/h. click Edit. Click OK twice. For Space Type. For Ground Plane. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you need to select this option. verify that 1' 0" is specified. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. ■ On the Weather tab. and then click . ft. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. right-click. and click OK. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. for Building Service. under Volume Computations. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and enter 50 sq. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Values. For Export Complexity. and click OK. select space Library 219. For Project Phase. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Condition Type. select Heated and cooled. select Specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. both.

In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. for Values. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and can be modified here. is specified. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and under Heating Information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Edit. select Actual. You should correct the space error in the building model. NH. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. You have verified the building information. For Location. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Click OK twice. verify that <Building> is specified. Under Power. Next. For Building Service. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. for Values. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Calculate. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. For Building Construction. verify that School or University is selected. 12 Click the Details tab. select Actual. For Electrical Loads. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building.■ ■ ■ Click OK. click Information). verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Manchester. Select the space associated with the warning. select 219 Library. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.

In this exercise. or make any changes to the model.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. under Energy Analysis. 21 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select HVAC Zones.rvt. and a loads report displays. and zone information for the building model. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click Training Files. space. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. space. select 219 Library. 15 Review the loads report for project. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 16 After you review the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click to the right of the building to place the legend. or zone information. For Color Scheme. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 17 In the loads report. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 3 In the drawing area. weather. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

select New Construction. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In this exercise. In the next exercise. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Space Fill is the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.12 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Phase. select Spaces. For Name. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. for Select available fields from. Click OK. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. more category options are available. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Select Schedule building components. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

select Airflow Delta. select Calculated Supply Airflow. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Header. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Conditional Format. enter . and Blank line. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click . For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Formula. and click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. for Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Not Between. Select Ascending.■ Under Available fields. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter Airflow Delta. In the Fields dialog. click (Browse). Click OK. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select HVAC. select Air Flow. and then select Hidden field. select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. Select Formula. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Type. select Number. For Then by. select Level.

■ ■ ■ For Value. Under Conditions to Use. verify that Show is highlighted. a view opens that contains the selected space. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the Color dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In later exercises. right-click to access schedule properties. ■ The schedule displays. Click OK twice. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. For Background Color. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. select red. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In the next lesson. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and click OK. click the color swatch. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In this exercise.

78 .

After system creation. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Then.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you modify air terminal parameters. you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and scroll to space 223.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 3 In the ceiling view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .

8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. for Flow. and select Supply Diffuser .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then press Esc to end the command. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 13 On the Options Bar. If the host element is modified or moved. click Place on Face. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Also. and then select both Copy and Multiple. verify that Constrain is cleared. 17 Move the cursor down.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . type 12. which in this case is the ceiling grid. select the diffuser. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.

you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. and click Open. Next. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. as shown. clear Leader. 22 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . As you place the return diffusers. click Yes. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. click Place on Face. select one of the diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers.rfa.

and click to select the lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click OK. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . under Other. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. for Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select one of the return diffusers. select Strong Reference. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and click OK. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line. For the start point. enter 9' 0"2750.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Press Esc. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design is highlighted. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space. and click View ➤ Systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. However. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . right-click the title. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Plan . After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. In this exercise. including energy analysis. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.rvt. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

6 Keep the System Browser open. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and Flow value. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. On the Options Bar. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 15 Click Cancel. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. As you add diffusers to systems. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. the number of elements is updated. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. review the Number of Elements. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy.

22 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. the air terminals are the children. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. which updates the name in the System Browser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for Mark. under Identity Data. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 25 Click OK. and the system connects them. for System Name. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. Rename the system Next. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In this exercise. under Mechanical. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 18 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Plan. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.rvt. Also.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A Generate Layout tab displays. for Solution Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the Network type provides several solutions. 5 On the Options Bar. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper left diffuser.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area. select Network. In this case. and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

enter 9' 10 1/2". For Duct Type. Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. as shown. you’ll get an error in a later step. click Settings. enter 3'. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.Round. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.7 On the Options Bar. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Offset. click Modify. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Click OK. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Offset. For Duct Type. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.

Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. For example.11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click to select it.Flow. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. a disconnection exists. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Usually. select Duct Color Fill .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. but not all values are used in this view. for Color Scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and then click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. fittings. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. If the entire network does not highlight. under Graphics. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. select By View. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click OK. for Values Displayed. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Using a flow-based color scheme. thus it is not part of the system. The first time you press Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct. and equipment. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme.

Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Mechanical . Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. for Schemes. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select Duct Color Fill . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. 26 Click OK. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the color scheme legend. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Airflow. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Velocity. and on the Options Bar.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select the WSHP. and click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Calculated Size Only. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". The ductwork and fittings are updated. select Friction. Click OK.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . click Cancel. and then click to select it. Select Restrict Height. Select Only. for Branch Sizing. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight a segment of the duct. Under Constraints. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.

so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Use the information that displays (flow. static pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. click Training Files. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path.

and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

Front.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP . 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. NOTE When drawing duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. select 9' 10 1/2". select the top right diffuser. for Offset.3D MEP. right-click the connector grip. click the corner where the Top.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created. 22 Using the same method. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Also. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). it is considered a closed loop. the color fill indicates the flow value. in space 115.

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and click to select it. 30 Press Esc twice. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.

Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Airflow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. such as a plenum. and then click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 40 Using the same method. select a segment of the main duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. under Constraints. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. for Flow. under Mechanical .

Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Create return and supply piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. including 2 base mounted pumps.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. and a cooling tower located on the roof. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Left Return .2-6 Tons . in corridor 328. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.HVAC Plan .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. verify that Wall faces is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design is highlighted.High Efficiency . and select WSHP .Horizontal . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.

and enter 2'. and in the Type Selector.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown.

and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 2 WSHPs. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 12 GPM. enter 9'. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.14 Click Modify. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Offset. for Water Flow. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.21 Click Modify. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create the logical connection between the system components.

You can create pipes to connect system components. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system. and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading. Unlike logical connections (systems). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Mech 330). physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. where it is easier to review the information. Creating a Piping System | 115 .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. for System Name. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Notice that on the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. As you assign equipment to systems. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the 2 WSHPs. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. select the boiler. Therefore. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 12 In the drawing area. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. This display indicates that the system is selected. while pressing Ctrl. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.

13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. You have created the hydronic return system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the cooling tower. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 . 17 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.

In heating mode. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 29 Right-click CHWS.22 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 23 Close the roof plan view. 28 Using the same method. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). In cooling mode. and click Expand All. expand the Hydronic Return system category. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Select. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). indicating the logical connection. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.

and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. including the flow rate and size of the component. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. you can view several parameters. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click Properties. and click Column Settings.In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. expand Piping. enter 18 GPM.

you can place the cursor over a system component. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). select Mechanical Equipment. select CHWR. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. then the Select a System dialog displays. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. click Training Files. 9 In the Select a System dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and click to select it. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. When you draw a box to select components.HVAC Plan . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. the boiler. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. A system preview displays in red. press Tab to highlight the system. click Check None. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Mech 330). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 10 Click OK. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Design is highlighted.

you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. enter 1' 6''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. It does not reference the architecture. or architectural components. click Settings. structural beams. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and the flow for the other is 12. 17 Optionally. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and press Tab 3 times. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.

notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.

and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Logically. Next. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. which propagates flow throughout the system. double-click Level 1 . On the Options Bar.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 27 On the System Tools panel. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.HVAC Plan . 28 In the Project Browser. the Number of Elements is now 8. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. you physically close the CHWR loop. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. under Mechanical. as shown. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. select a WSHP. access its instance properties. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then close the Instance Properties dialog. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .40 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Slope. enter 0''/12''. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK. Click Settings. select CHWS.

) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise. as shown. 46 Click Modify.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.50 Using the same method. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. To create the piping system.

You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ 3D Views.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the return pipes are magenta. double-click 3D HVAC Building. As you work in the training file. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.rvt.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.

■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view.

click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the return pipe riser. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 13 In the plan view. select the boiler. and the lower one is secondary.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click OK. The connections are automatically created.

■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view. ■ Move the cursor down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and you select 1 connector. and press Enter. enter 1' . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping.7''. enter 2'. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and select it. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click to draw the pipe. click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. you select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. and click Draw Pipe.

31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 33 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump.

as shown. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously.

enter 9' 6''. for Offset. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 1'. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.

and click Element Properties. Next. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify.

In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.50 or 50% of the Flow. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 44 In the 3D view. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).39 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. view the properties for the secondary pump. When you create the pumps in parallel. 43 Press Esc. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. under Mechanical. select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method. 46 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Connect the cooling tower Next. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view. for Cooling Water Flow. notice that under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). the value is 0 GPM. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 42 Click OK.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

click Training Files. Adding Valves In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. When the valve is open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. select the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.50 In the 3D View. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).rvt. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and close the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler.

4 On the Options Bar. and select Ball Valve .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. as shown.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .

and click OK. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. right-click. and select Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. under Mechanical. 20 Select the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. In heating mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 19 Using the same method. Adding Valves | 145 . For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.HVAC Plan . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Initially. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.rvt.Design is highlighted.

select Pipe Color Fill . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Flow. for Schemes.

and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select And. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing. Click OK.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and enter 2. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). enter 5 FPS. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.

you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. pressure. or manually modify the pipe. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System In this exercise. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. click Training Files. Inspecting the System | 149 . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select a different layout solution. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. This information helps you modify the system design. An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

select 90° F. 10 Click Finish. for Fluid Temperature.88 psi. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and to size pipe.67 psi. as shown. and the Pressure Loss is 1. inspect Section 6 again. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise. 9 Using the same method.89 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and click OK. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. targeting those systems that need attention.

Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. click Training Files. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. the pipe is associated with that system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 4 In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click View.HVAC Plan . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. For example.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. As you learned when placing components. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click the Systems titlebar. After you assign components to a system.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and click Show to view all of the system components. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. In the System Browser. thus assigning the components to a system. and double-click Level 3 . 7 In the System Browser. and for pipe sizing. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. After you have assigned all components to systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Design. double-click Level 1 . Warnings display. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.

and confirm unassigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 10 Using the same methods. right-click Hydronic Return. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. click Close. otherwise. expand the Unassigned folder.Design floor plan. and click Expand All.TIP If you have multiple views open. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and select Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 13 Right-click CHWR. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter 1. ■ ■ For Material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Training Files. enter THHN. As you place components and create circuits. select Copper. For Temperature Rating. select 75. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Click OK. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Wiring Types. speeding up the design phase. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Wire Sizes. Select Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. click (Open). wiring. select Copper. For Material.04.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Temperature. select 90. expand Wiring . 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ ■ For Factor.rvt. You also add a wiring type.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. for Custom Colors. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. 167 . Create a panel schedule. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. power circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Scheme Definition. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. for Basic Colors. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 fc. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. By using orange as the color for this range. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. for the Spaces Category. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. In the Color dialog. You can create additional color schemes. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. select Orange. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.rvt. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill view is open. click Training Files. select the color legend.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.7 In the Project Browser. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 8 In the Project Browser. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 . which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.277. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The red field will clear once the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.

20 Select the lighting fixture. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 23 Click OK. the fixtures will move accordingly. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. select Multiple.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

277V.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.277V. The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. 42 In the drawing area.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click (Open). In the next exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown.Lighting Color Fill plan.

the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Initial Intensity. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click OK. select T5 [HO].93. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.00 lm.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.85. select Xenon and click OK. for Lamp. for Color Preset. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ Click OK twice.277V and click OK. enter .ies and click Open. for Type Mark. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. enter . for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter 162. Under Photometrics. for Apparent Load. In the Name dialog. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Under Identity Data. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. specify 15000. and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Initial Color. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. select 463T5_S. enter F15.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. click Check None. 10 In the Filter dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Click OK.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

Junction Boxes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. and Receptacles | 183 . The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes.rvt. Placing Switches. and receptacles to your design.Press Delete. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. you add switches.

7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Select Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches.rfa and click Open.

for Level 2 . note the Number of Poles is 1. In the Type Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click Edit Type. enter 9’0”. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. 15 Select the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. for Mark.

right-click and click Column Settings. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Select Size. Expand Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. Click OK. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 24 For any column. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 26 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. and Number of Elements. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. NOTE If necessary. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Distribution System. and Voltage.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. Space Number. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Load.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle.

move the cursor along the wall.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down.

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click Training Files. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

Loads. Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. enter PP-2B. for Max. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. For Panel Name. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . #1 Pole Breakers. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System. select 480/277 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 120/208 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A.

For Panel Name. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. for Max. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. enter 20. enter LP-2B.Loads. zoom to space Instruction 221. 23 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. enter 2. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and for Category. except without wire. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Check None. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). select Wires. for Hot Conductors. 41 In the Filter dialog. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .

Expand Electrical. Distribution System. and Voltage Drop are selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files.rvt. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and verify that Load. Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. right-click on the Systems heading. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Rating. 13 In the System Browser. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 30 Close the System Browser. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.

click below the first one to place it. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. enter FR4. for Type Mark. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click OK. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 40 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Tags. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. under Identity Data. 47 In the drawing area.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click Edit Type. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Yes. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .

Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Next you create a switch system. enter a comma. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Break. Click Save. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 56 In the Filter dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. For Circuit Number. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . for File Name. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. and click Apply. select Lighting Fixture Tags.rfa. click Check None. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 52 In the Save As dialog.

10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter a.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. under Electrical Lighting.rvt. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. click (Open). Click OK.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. enter b.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. under Electrical . for switch ID. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting.

Circuits are used for power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and data systems. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Electrical Fixtures. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . lighting. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 7 In space Electrical 220. Click OK. select the PP-2B panel.rvt. and for Category. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. click Training Files.

select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter 2. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 19 Click OK. and click Element Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. under Electrical . 13 Select the wire again. for Hot Conductors. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads.rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. and in the drawing area. and click Open. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select the PP-2B panel. and click to select the circuit.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 22 In space Electrical 220. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221.

select panel LP-2B. 2 In the drawing area. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Finally. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Training Files. zoom to space Electrical 220.

1-#12. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12. Notice that the loads on Phase A. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. Scroll down. enter 30A. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. for Rating. Click OK. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#10. B. click Rebalance Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 6 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and Phase C . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3712 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Under Electrical-Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 14 Close the warning dialog. Phase B 3636 VA.3616 VA).

Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 25A. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Select PP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. under Electrical . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Next you create a panel schedule. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. for Rating. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 30A. click Training Files. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. under Electrical . and click OK.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click (Open).Loads. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.

8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 5 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Body Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. for Appearance. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Header Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Font. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Header Text.rvt. for Font Size. under Other. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 4 Close the report.Panel Schedules. and open E601 . select Berlin Sans FB. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. enter 1/8. click (Open). 7 Select the schedule. enter 3/32. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click Training Files.

In the System Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Unassigned. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. each with a load of 180VA. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. In the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. press TAB once.

select MDP-1. for Panel. 15 In the dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. under Warnings. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

right-click PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK.Plumbing Plan . Adding a pipe size. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 219 . 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. in addition to loading existing families. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. click Training Files. In this exercise. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and verify that Level 1 .Vent. and click Properties.Sanitary. In this lesson. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.

enter 5/8''. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select Sanitary. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. click Pipe Settings. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. for Nominal. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 10 On the Selection panel. In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Mechanical.PVC .0''. 25 For Outside. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Pipe Types. click Training Files. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. For Offset. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. PVC . select Sanitary. enter 27/32''. click Modify.Sch 40 . 18 For System Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 26 Click OK. select Plastic. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Tap. Cross. 17 In the left pane. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .rfa. select Tee. and click Main.PVC .PVC . 27 For the new pipe size. enter 1/2''. Tee. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Branch. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV: Standard.DWV: Standard. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Sch 40 . select Tee Vent . for Material. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.DWV.Sch 40 . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 21 In the right pane.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select None. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Vent is listed. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . enter 10°. 15 For System Type. 6 Click OK. 24 For Inside Diameter. 13 In the right panel. enter -4' . 22 Click New Size.

Create the cold water system. Create the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. add a hot water heater. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. sanitary piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.

move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. NOTE To identify a space name and number. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you add 2 toilets. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 1 urinal. including the men’s room (space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

in the Type Selector. as shown. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.Flush Valve . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select Public .Wall Mounted. and 3 sinks.1. 4 On the Element panel. against the left wall. under Water Closet . 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.6 gpf. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 1 wall-mounted urinal.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. use the reference line to center the fixture. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal .) 8 Press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. zoom in closer. (Again. above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face.2'' Drain. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. 12 On the Placement panel. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . In placing the fixture. 14 Click Modify.

19 Expand Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and review the components listed under this system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. a urinal. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. and a floor drain.rvt. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. click Training Files. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 8 In the Filter dialog. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design is open. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 2 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. and click OK. and verify that Level 1 .

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter Sanitary 107. expand Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. so the Create Sanitary System is available. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. If you deselected the drain.

a toilet. select Sanitary 107. and click OK. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays. as shown. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 16 In the Select a System dialog. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.

You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Slope. for Diameter. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Main. for Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and click Settings. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Intersections. 23 For Offset. select Branch. enter -4'-0”. 26 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 27 Click Modify. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and for Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Solutions. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 21 On Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Solution Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The default settings are automatically modified. You accept this suggested solution. and click OK. 24 In the left pane. select 4''.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Modify.30 In the 3D view. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

and verify that Level 1 . 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. under Lavatory .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Plumbing Plan . select 22''x22'' . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.Public. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design is open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Rectangular.

and press Enter to create a second sink. For example. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. TIP When entering dimensions. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 8 Select the sink. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. On the Options Bar.7 Click Modify. enter 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 11 In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink. 15 Click the 3 sinks. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Press Esc. 16 On the Edit System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 12 In the drawing area.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the plan view. 19 In the 3D view. 21 Select the tee. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.In the System Browser. 20 Select the fitting. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. double-click 3D Plumbing. with the tee fitting selected. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.

piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. In this example. 26 On the Options Bar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.6''. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' . When you press the Spacebar.

32 Select the double wye fitting. click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify.PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. 30 In the 3D view. under Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard.Sch 40 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.

and press Enter. and press Enter. enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view.33 With the fitting selected. right-click the right connector. enter 6''. In the next steps. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 36 In the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in to the double wye fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. for Offset.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view. enter 6''. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. 47 Move the cursor down.

click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 56 Using the same method. 55 In the 3D view. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view.DWV. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P .PVC .Sch 40 . 53 Using the same method.

58 Using the same method. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the plan view. and press Enter. connect the right sink to the double wye.. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. select the left P-Trap.

select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel.■ In the 3D view. Press Esc. In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Finish. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 62 On the Options Bar. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. for Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the vertical stack. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. and click the intersection to place the fitting. as shown. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector. 7 On the Selection panel.Design. 10 In the 3D view. 5 Select the tee. select the elbow fitting on the right.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .DWV. and click to draw the pipe. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view.PVC .Floor level line. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design.Overall.Sch 40 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.

17 In the Type Selector. as shown. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 18 In the plan view.DWV. 13 Click the rotate control once.PVC . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Select the fitting. 14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. select Standard. 15 Press Esc.Sch 40 .11 Click Modify. under Plug . enter 1'-0”. for Offset.

and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.19 Click Modify. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .

select Domestic Cold Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. click Check None. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. To minimize opportunities for piping interference.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Design ➤ 3D Views. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 14 In the System Browser. urinal. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the right pane. for System Type. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box to select the toilets. For Offset. 17 In the Filter dialog.Overall. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. if necessary. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and for System Type. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and click Main. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. expand Unassigned. and click OK. select Domestic Hot Water. select Main. 9 In the left pane. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 In the plan view. and sinks. double-click 3D Plumbing . 6 In the left pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 10 Click OK. select Plumbing Fixtures. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. minimize the Sanitary system. for System Type. select Branch. select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. enter 9' 3''.

21 On the Edit System panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. For Flow Conversion Method. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. click Edit System. click Finish Editing System. 19 On the System Tools panel. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. In the System Browser. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system.

connect the second toilet. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 33 Click Modify. enter 3' . verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and press Enter.25 Using the same method. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 7''. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and click the connector.2 7/8''. select the sink above the urinal. select Water. enter 4'0”. as shown. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 35 In the Type Selector. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 10'. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top DCW connector. For Offset. 30 In the plan view. as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. under Pipe Types. and click to place the pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 0”/12”. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. select 3/4''. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click to the left of the urinal. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 34 In the plan view. for Offset. for Offset. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. For Slope.

select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.39 Move the cursor to the left. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . add a water heater. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method.

Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .rvt.Overall. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. select the 3 sinks. and verify that Level 1 . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder.

in the Unassigned folder. under Water Heater . the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the System Browser. 13 In the plan view.Tankless. When designing systems. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. and click OK. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 14 Click Modify. select 0.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you edit the system to add equipment. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Domestic Cold Water. as shown. 15 In the System Browser. and click Edit System. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. Default Domestic Hot Water. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. In later steps.6 Gallon. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.

and select Draw Pipe. and click the water main line. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Offset: 4' 6''. Slope: 0''/12''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and press Enter. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. select the water heater. and on the Edit System panel. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. right-click the middle left connector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 19 Select the water heater. as shown. 27 Click Modify. enter 10’. 24 Move the cursor up. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 1' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 25 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector.

31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Finish Editing System. 36 Move the cursor down. enter 1''. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. for Offset. and for Offset. 35 On the Options Bar.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. for Diameter. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 30 On the System Tools panel. 33 On the Edit System panel. as shown. enter 9' 0''. 37 On the Options Bar. select a sink. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1' 6''. and on the Placement Tools panel. and in the System Selector. select 4'-6''. click Edit System. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and press Enter.

for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown.39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 1’. and press Enter. 42 Click Modify. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

click Training Files. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. After finishing each exercise. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this tutorial. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this lesson.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can choose to save your work. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 2 Right-click Standard. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. go to http://www. 267 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

or architectural components. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. under Mechanical. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. click Rename. For System Type. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Next. 9 Click OK. select Carbon Steel. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Material. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 6 In the Project Browser. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. duct. and then click OK. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. However. For Pipe Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. structural beams. and click Properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. For Offset. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. In this exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Click OK twice. Under Categories. under Fire Protection. right-click. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. for Name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and then click OK. click Training Files. select Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 8 Using a crossing window.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Add. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Design is highlighted. and click Element Properties. For Group parameter under. select the upper half of the building. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. enter Zone 1. indicating that it’s the active view.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. you create schedules for sprinkler design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. select Zone 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. enter Zone 2. to which you add various parameters. including a calculated value parameter. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.

click Add Parameter. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Type of Parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Light. Select Schedule keys. 11 Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted. and on the ribbon. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fire Protection. 6 Using the same method. Obstructed-Combustible. click the Formatting tab. In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Length. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter 15. enter Maximum Spacing. For Name. select Feet and fractional inches. indicating that it’s the active view. For Key name. Click OK. select Spaces. 10 In the Format dialog. For Rounding.Fire Protection Plan . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Units. 7 Click OK. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Group parameter under. select To the nearest 1'. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. The schedule displays. Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 14 Select the new header. enter Protection Area Construction Type. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Field Format. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.

based on the parameter settings you specified previously. and press Enter. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 16 Using the same method. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. select Spaces. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. under Available fields. enter 130. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.

Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. click Edit. For Units. select Fixed. click . for Sorting/Grouping. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Discipline. For Type. Click OK. For Rounding. select Number. select Level. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). under Other. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. for Sort by. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. select 0 decimal place. select Area. and click Field Format. 20 On the Formatting tab. 19 Click the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. For Then by. 22 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. click Edit. select Level equals Level 2. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 27 In the drawing area. verify that Use default settings is selected. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. for Filter by. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. For Then by (second instance). 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 30 Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. select Number. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. and select Totals only. 26 Click OK 3 times.

for Fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. and click View Properties. click Edit. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Available fields. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Count. double-click Type.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select Totals only. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. For Category. under Other. delete the word Maximum. select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. System Name. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Sprinklers. select Calculate totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click FP . 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 48 In the floor plan. for Protection Area Construction Type. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Ordinary. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Unobstructed. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. 46 With the space still selected. select Light. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click OK. select space 221 Instruction. As a result. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 50 Access the instance properties. 43 Click Cancel. 41 In the plan view.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. As you create the system. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. However. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. methodology. By following the recommended workflow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.rvt. and double-click Level 2 .FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you place the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 279 .

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When there is a small misalignment. 3 In the Project Browser. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. as shown. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. and select Sprinkler . 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.

Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. and then press Esc. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. 29 Press Esc. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. enter 11. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. move the cursor to the right. specify a vertical offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 18 Type WT. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. This number is determined in the schedule. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 14' 6". you place non-hosted sprinklers.FP_Ceiling view. 200B. enter 10' 6".Design. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you adjust the offset. open Design ➤ FP . 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Next. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and press Enter. 19 In the floor plan. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and click Element Properties. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. For Number. Notice that the schedule updates. for Offset. and 200C).Fire Protection Plan .

physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. In the next exercise. In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. After creating the logical connection.Design is highlighted. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and with piping (physical connection). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. click Training Files. However. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.

It does not indicate a pipe layout path. click View ➤ Systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Creating a Piping System | 285 . As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. 5 Right-click the header. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. as shown. In the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and select Piping. named Fire Protection Wet. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

14 Click Finish Editing System. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 19 Click OK.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. verify that Main is selected. providing system editing tools. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. system equipment. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and click Select. and on the Options Bar. select an initial piping layout. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 15 In the drawing area. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 13 In the System Browser. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. In the left pane. enter FP Wet_Zone2. For Offset. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. select Branch. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and number of elements in the system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. indicating the logical connection. press Tab. place the cursor over a sprinkler. For Pipe Type. for System Name. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and a piping layout preview displays. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Next. and select the system.Wet is selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. click Settings. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.

verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. enter -12' 0". and green represents branch lines). and select solution 5. select 2". click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Place Base.20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 24 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. as shown. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.

A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 29 Click Finish Layout. click Modify. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

the Connect Into tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary. or that offset elevations are incorrect. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Next. and then you create piping to physically connect them.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. and various manual pipe creation tools.

3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in.

5 In the drawing area. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 8 In the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . click Add To System. 9 On the Edit System panel. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 5. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and pipe or duct is created. verify that Network is selected. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. mechanical equipment. 12 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. or a system component to display system tools. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. radiators. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 11 On the Generate Layout panel.

20 Open Design ➤ FP . zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then tile the views. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 23 View the result in the 3D view. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 29 Using the same method. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Offset. 24 In the Piping Plan. right-click. and then press Esc. select 9'. 25 Select the sprinkler. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 27 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

31 In the plan view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

double-click on the section head to open the section view.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. select 1/4" = 1'-0". indicating that it’s the active view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Scale. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. ■ 6 Press Esc.Fire Protection Plan . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4". for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. as shown.

you created a wet fire protection system. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 307 . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1. and click Rename. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. and click OK.rvt. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. dependent views. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Properties. matchlines. and apply a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. 2 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references.

right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 6 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. more focused. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 4 Using the same method. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 Click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and then press Esc. and click Apply Default View Template.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. views and put them on the sheet. 10 In the drawing area. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. create dependent views for areas B and C. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. as shown. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.

click the current value. select Double Dash 5/8"./ ---). click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . For Line Pattern. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and then press Esc. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. for Target view. on the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc twice. select black. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. and click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight. Click OK. select 11. 21 Using the same method. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. In the Color dialog.

27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. as shown. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and zoom to each of the view references.

Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. For Sub-Discipline. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Graphics. and click Properties. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for View Name. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and select the section box.rvt. select Plumbing Isometric. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template. select Documentation. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The section crop lines no longer display. and click to select it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. for View Classification.Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . For Default View Template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select 3.9 Right-click. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click to select it. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. press Tab 3 times.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.Sanitary Waste. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. click Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Domestic Water view with detailing. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.

for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. For Slope. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. In the Format dialog. 21 Click OK twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. When the view is associated with a sheet. select To the nearest 1/8". the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. as shown. Creating Callout Views | 315 . you use a plan view to create a callout view. verify that Common is selected. click on the Format value. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 25 Press Esc twice. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

select 1/4"=1'-0''. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.

8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. using the same method. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . for Line Weight. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. under Sheets (all). select 5.

and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. and select the viewport. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 17 In the Project Browser.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click the detail view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 26 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Names. and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

and annotation to create a legend. linetypes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 321 . duct tags. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols.

and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Creating Annotations In this exercise.rvt. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown.

select a supply diffuser. a segment of round duct. and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box.

21 In the Load Family dialog.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and click Open. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. for Ducts. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 17 Click Modify. clear Leader. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. under Category. If necessary.rfa.

32 In the drawing area.25 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. and then press Esc. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. for Leader. as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and click OK. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. lay out. 40 Using the method learned previously. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and all elements of that type are affected. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.36 Press Esc twice. not simply an instance property. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed. select Dot Open 1/16". and lock lighting fixtures. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Press Esc. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and then select the interior face of the wall. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. select the dimension line. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. click Training Files. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension.rvt.

3 1/2"). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. annotation symbols. and notes. and press Enter. Because the dimensions are locked.13 Using the same method. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Creating a Legend | 329 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 16 Press Esc. and offset them 8' from the wall. 19 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. linework. enter 8'. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. click the 3 interior locks on the line.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter Diffuser Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Scale. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 5 Click in the drawing area. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 10 Using the same method. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. click below the title to place the diffuser.

11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

RISE symbol for the copy start point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line. The selected detail lines are now thin.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 26 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 21 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc.

34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.30 Select Spot Elevation . enter E.MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson.rvt. detail groups. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 335 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A detail callout that references another view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. and text. A drafting view using detail components.

and click to place it. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 5 In the drawing area. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views. Next. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser . place Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 On the Options Bar.

enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 13 Right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.9 Press Esc. under Identity Data. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View.

as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. In the next exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 22 Press Esc. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Select the Level 1 line. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and click Activate View.

In the New Subcategory dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Lines. as shown. As you draw. 9 Beginning at the transformer. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. notice that there are no snaps active. click Training Files. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar.rvt. for Name.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Chain is selected. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). for Line Weight. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Under Modify Subcategories. indicating that it’s the active view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . enter Electrical Power.113 North view. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click New.

enter 1/8". for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 11 Using the same method.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 28 Click above the cap. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 29 Click Modify.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

39 Move the cursor to the right. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and press Enter. for Offset.5. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 40 Press Esc. enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. select all 3 lines. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. enter Ground. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. Press Esc. and then press Esc. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail.25. enter 0 0.125. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. while pressing Ctrl. Using the same method.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. for Name. 50 With the group selected. 47 In the drawing area.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.

3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In later exercises. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and will place it on sheet E01. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. click Training Files. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Rename. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. for Name. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Back.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. 7 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Under Names. Walkthroughs. right-click. Click OK. and click Apply View Template. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D Views. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. Typical. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. (Right). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor down and to the left. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

25 Click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and under Extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Click OK. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. For Scale.29 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.rvt. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the view name. and click Properties. select 3" = 1'-0". select the isometric view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

select Documentation. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. select Plumbing. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). click the point at the top of the drain. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Sub-Discipline. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as the rectangle start point. as shown. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 9 Zoom in to the component. For View Classification.

24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and click OK. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.P.I.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. select the filled region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 22 Click Modify. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. (Line). Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. select C. and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 18 With the filled region still selected. Concrete. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. for Type. 23 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click to select them. 34 Press Esc. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.

47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.D. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. press Tab to highlight the chain.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. draw wide detail lines as shown. for Name. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 In the Create Group dialog. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and click OK. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and then click to select them.

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and then click OK. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 71 Click Modify.62 Press Esc twice.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select Leader and Free End. as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 72 If necessary. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title. 90 Press Esc. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

select Black and White. select 3. select Auto-Detect. For Import units.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.dwg. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. For A-----NPP. you import a CAD detail drawing. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Line Weight. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. For Layers. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Click Open. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK.rvt. select Visible. For Colors. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 12 In the drawing area. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title. open P103 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it.8 Type ZF.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful